CD RECEIVER
RÉCEPTEUR CD
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GET0568-003A
[EX/EU]
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
4
6
7
Disc operations............................................. 10
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Listening to the other external
components.............................................. 11
How to forcibly eject a disc
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12
Menu operations.......................................... 13
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
REFERENCES
More about this unit .................................... 15
Troubleshooting........................................... 17
Maintenance................................................ 19
Specifications............................................... 20
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
3
Basic operations
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• CD: Select folder.
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Select the source.
FM = CD*1 = AUX IN*2 = AM*2 = (back to
the beginning)
8
9
Eject disc.
• Activate/deactivate TA Standby Reception.
• Enter PTY Searching mode [Hold].
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM: Search for station.
• CD: Select track.
2
3
p
q
w
e
r
Return to the previous menu.
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
4
5
• Enter list operations.
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3
• CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3
Loading slot
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no
disc is in the unit.
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 15).
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
2
*
6
7
3
Display window
*
4
Display window
1
2
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
DISC indicator
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
EQ (equalizer) indicator
7
8
LOUD (loudness) indicator
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Radio Data System indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
3
4
9
p
q
5
6
OPERATIONS
5
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 13.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or “12 HOUR.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 13)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
Station Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
FM Radio
Data System beginning)
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency = Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the
CD
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*1 = Track title*1 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
Album name/performer (folder name)*2 = Track title (file name)*2 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 13),
folder name and file name appear.
2
6
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
• See also page 14.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
2
Select preset number “04.”
Continued on the next page
OPERATIONS
7
3
3
Start searching for your favorite programme.
or
If a station is broadcasting a programme of the
same PTY code as you have selected, that station is
tuned in.
Selecting preset station
or
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
[Turn] = [Press]
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the
current level is lower than the preset level (see
page 14).
The following features are available only for FM
Radio Data System stations.
To activate TA Standby Reception
The TP (Traffic Programme)
indicator either lights up or flashes.
Searching for FM Radio Data
System programme —PTY Search
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is
activated.
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening
to an FM station without the Radio Data System
signals required for TA Standby Reception.)
To activate the reception, tune in to another station
providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop
flashing and remain lit.
1
2
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Select one of your favorite programme types
or a PTY code.
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
The TP indicator goes off.
8
PTY Standby Reception
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you select a preset number, the station
preset in that number is tuned in.
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset
station are not sufficient for good reception, this
unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency
possibly broadcasting the same programme as the
original preset station is broadcasting.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
• See also page 14.
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception
is activated.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
To activate the reception, tune in to another station
providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop
flashing and remain lit.
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select
“PTY OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY
indicator goes off.
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM Radio Data System station of the same
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme
with stronger signals (see the illustration below).
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.
OPERATIONS
9
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
1
2
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
MP3/WMA: Select folder
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
Selecting a track/folder
[Turn] = [Press]
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
10 OPERATIONS
Selecting the playback modes
REPEAT
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
1
RANDOM
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then
tracks of next folders
2
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 15.
Select “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
—
2
3
Adjust the volume.
You can adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output
level (see “AUX ADJUST” on page 14).
Adjust the sound as you want (see page 12).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre.
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
[Turn] = [Press]
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset values
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
Indication (For)
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
OFF
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
ROCK (Rock or disco music) +03 +01 ON
CLASSIC (Classical music)
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
3
4
Select a tone.
POPS (Light music)
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00
ON
[Turn] = [Press]
BASS Ô TREBLE
JAZZ (Jazz music)
+02 +03 OFF
Adjust the level.
Tone
Level
BASS
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
TREBLE
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
5
Finish the procedure.
12
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
demonstration
CLOCK DISP*1
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
:
:
• CLOCK ON
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
Clock display
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [6].
[Initial: 0:00]
• 24 HOUR
24H/12H
:
See also page 6 for setting.
Time display mode • 12 HOUR
CLOCK ADJ *2
Clock adjustment
• AUTO
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.
Cancels.
• OFF
EQ
:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*3
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
• TAG ON
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA
Tag display
tracks.
• TAG OFF
:
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Takes effect only when CT (clock time) data is received.
2
3
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Continued on the next page
SETTINGS 13
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
AF-REG *4
Alternative
frequency/
regionalization
reception
• AF ON
:
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station (the programme may differ
from the one currently received), [9].
• The AF indicator lights up.
When the currently received signals become weak, the
unit switches to another station broadcasting the same
programme.
• AF-REG ON
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
Cancels.
• OFF
PTY-STANDBY *4 PTY OFF, PTY
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes,
[9].
PTY standby
codes
TA VOLUME *4
Traffic
announcement
volume
VOLUME 00
Initial: VOLUME 15
– VOLUME 50
(or VOLUME 00
– VOLUME 30)*5
P-SEARCH *4
Programme search • SEARCH OFF
• SEARCH ON
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].
Cancels.
MONO*6
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but
stereo effect will be lost, [7].
• MONO OFF
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect
will remain.
• WIDE
:
FADER*7
Fader
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE
Balance
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
AUX ADJUST
Auxiliary input
level adjustment
AUX ADJ 00
— AUX ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden
increase of the output level when changing the source to
external component connected to the AUX input jack on
the control panel.
4
5
6
7
*
*
*
*
Only for FM Radio Data System stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
14 SETTINGS
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
TEL MUTING
Telephone
muting
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• MUTING OFF
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a
cellular phone.
Cancels.
:
AMP GAIN*8
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*9
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
AUX IN*10
Auxiliary input • AUX ON
• AUX OFF
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
8
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
9
*
*
10
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
More about this unit
Basic operations
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
Turning off the power
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
SETTINGS & REFERENCES 15
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
FM Radio Data System operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types
of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme
Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)
to work correctly. Without receiving these data
correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not
operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower
than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. On the other hand,
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. (See page 14.)
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
General
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA
formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
16
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 15).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 15).
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 17
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
18
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 19
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
12 dB at 100 Hz
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
Treble:
12 dB at 10 kHz
Frequency Response:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
65 dB
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
MW Tuner
LW Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
Sensitivity:
50 μV
20
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 21
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil
Dear Customer,
Cher(e) client(e),
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,
Limited:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Allemagne
Germany
EN, FR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0908DTSMDTJEIN
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301
Installation/Connection Manual
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
0908DTSMDTJEIN
EN, FR
GET0568-010A
[EX/EU]
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
WARNINGS
AVERTISSEMENTS
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la
voiture après l’installation.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
Remarques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur
d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 15 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande
isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant
cet appareil.
Heat sink
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,
will be seriously damaged.
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des
enceintes de votre voiture.
Parts list for installation and connection
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur
autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A
B
C
Control panel
Panneau de commande
Sleeve
Manchon
Trim plate
Plaque d’assemblage
D
E
F
Power cord
Cordon d’alimentation
Washer (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
G
H
I
Mounting bolt
Rubber cushion
Amortisseur en caoutchouc
Handles
Poignées
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Boulon de montage
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)
1
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie
d’approvisionnement.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying
kits.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien
qualifié.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Do the required electrical connections.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Tordez les languettes appropriées
pour maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit
Retrait de l’appareil
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du
hauban en option
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil
scans utiliser de manchon
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Stay (option)
Hauban (en option)
Fire wall
Cloison
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Bracket*2
Support*2
Dashboard
Tableau de bord
Screw (option)
Vis (en option)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Poche
Bracket*2
Support*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins
de 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws
are used, they could damage the unit.
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
2
2
2
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Pour certaines automobiles VW/Audi ou
If your car is equipped with the ISO
A
connector / Si votre voiture est équippée
d’un connecteur ISO
Opel (Vauxhall)
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.
From the car body
De la carrosserie de la
voiture
Original wiring / Câblage original
Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector
Connecteur ISO
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation
fourni
I
J
L
K
M
O
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2
N
P
Y: Yellow
Jaune
R: Red
Rouge
View from the lead side
Vue à partir du côté des fils
Connections without using the ISO connector / Connexions sans utiliser le connecteur ISO
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en
couleur.
1 Cut the ISO connector.
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
3 Connect the aerial cord.
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
Rear line out (see diagram
Sortie de ligne arrière (voir le diagramme
)
Rear ground terminal
Borne arrière de masse
)
15 A fuse
Fusible 15 A
Aerial terminal
Borne de l’antenne
Ignition switch
Interrupteur d’allumage
Black
Noir
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Yellow *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Jaune *2
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Fuse block
Porte-fusible
Red
Rouge
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Blue with white stripe
Bleu avec bande blanche
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
Brown
Marron
To cellular phone system
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
White with black
stripe
White
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gris avec bande noire
Gray
Gris
Green with black stripe
Vert avec bande noire
Green
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Violet avec bande noire
Purple
Violet
Blanc avec bande
noire
Left speaker (front)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Right speaker (front)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Left speaker (rear)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Right speaker (rear)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut
pas être mis sous tension.
2
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected; otherwise, the
power cannot be turned on.
3
C
Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
Remote lead
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
To the remote lead of other equipment
or power aerial if any
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre
appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il
y en a une
Signal cord
(not supplied for this unit)
Cordon de signal
(non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
Front speakers (see diagram
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme
)
)
3
4
3
4
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
*
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.
TROUBLESHOOTING
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
• The fuse blows.
• Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted.
• Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Interférence avec les sons.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot.
• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• This unit does not work at all.
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Have you reset your unit?
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
4
CD RECEIVER
CD-RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ
∆ΕΚΤΗΣ ΜΕ CD
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301/
KD-R33
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 6.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.
Για να ακυρώσετε την επίδειξη λειτουργίας στην θóνη, βλ. σελίδα 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
Για πληρoφoρίες σχετικά µε την εγκατάσταση και τις συνδέσεις, ανατρέξτε στo αντίστoιχo ξεχωριστό εγχειρίδιo.
INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
Ο∆ΗΓΙΕΣ
GET0568-006A
[EY]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Battery
Caution on volume setting:
Products
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment and Batteries
[European Union only]
These symbols indicate that the product and the
battery with this symbol should not be disposed as
general household waste at its end-of-life.
If you wish to dispose of this product and the
battery, please do so in accordance with applicable
national legislation or other rules in your country
and municipality.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help
to conserve natural resources and will help prevent
potential negative effects on the environment and
human health.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Notice:
The sign Pb below the symbol for batteries indicates
that this battery contains lead.
2
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
4
6
7
Disc operations............................................. 10
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Listening to the other external
components.............................................. 11
How to forcibly eject a disc
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12
Menu operations.......................................... 13
Color settings (for KD-R33) .......................... 16
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
REFERENCES
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
More about this unit .................................... 17
Troubleshooting........................................... 19
Maintenance................................................ 21
Specifications............................................... 22
3
Basic operations
1
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• CD: Select folder.
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Select the source.
FM = CD*1 = AUX IN*2 = AM*2 = (back to
the beginning)
8
9
Eject disc.
• Activate/deactivate TA Standby Reception.
• Enter PTY Searching mode [Hold].
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM: Search for station.
• CD: Select track.
2
3
p
q
w
e
r
Return to the previous menu.
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
4
5
• Enter list operations.
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3
• CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3
Loading slot
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no
disc is in the unit.
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 15).
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
2
*
6
7
3
Display window
*
4
Display window
1
2
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
DISC indicator
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
EQ (equalizer) indicator
7
8
LOUD (loudness) indicator
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
Main display
Radio Data System indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
3
4
9
p
q
5
6
OPERATIONS
5
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 13.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or “12 HOUR.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 13)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
Station Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
FM Radio
Data System beginning)
Station name (PS) = Station Frequency = Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the
CD
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*1 = Track title*1 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA:
Album name/performer (folder name)*2 = Track title (file name)*2 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 13),
folder name and file name appear.
2
6
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
2
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
• See also page 14.
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “04.”
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
2
Select preset number “04.”
Continued on the next page
OPERATIONS
7
3
3
Start searching for your favorite programme.
or
If a station is broadcasting a programme of the
same PTY code as you have selected, that station is
tuned in.
Selecting preset station
or
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
[Turn] = [Press]
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the
current level is lower than the preset level (see
page 14).
The following features are available only for FM
Radio Data System stations.
To activate TA Standby Reception
The TP (Traffic Programme)
indicator either lights up or flashes.
Searching for FM Radio Data
System programme —PTY Search
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is
activated.
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening
to an FM station without the Radio Data System
signals required for TA Standby Reception.)
To activate the reception, tune in to another station
providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop
flashing and remain lit.
1
2
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Select one of your favorite programme types
or a PTY code.
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
The TP indicator goes off.
8
PTY Standby Reception
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you select a preset number, the station
preset in that number is tuned in.
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset
station are not sufficient for good reception, this
unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency
possibly broadcasting the same programme as the
original preset station is broadcasting.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
• See also page 14.
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception
is activated.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
To activate the reception, tune in to another station
providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop
flashing and remain lit.
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select
“PTY OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY
indicator goes off.
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM Radio Data System station of the same
network, possibly broadcasting the same programme
with stronger signals (see the illustration below).
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.
OPERATIONS
9
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
1
2
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
MP3/WMA: Select folder
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
Selecting a track/folder
[Turn] = [Press]
• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder, then
the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
10 OPERATIONS
Selecting the playback modes
REPEAT
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
1
RANDOM
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then
tracks of next folders
2
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
[Turn] = [Press]
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 15.
Select “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
—
2
3
Adjust the volume.
You can adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output
level (see “AUX ADJUST” on page 15).
Adjust the sound as you want (see page 12).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre.
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
[Turn] = [Press]
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
Select “EQ”
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset values
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
Indication (For)
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
OFF
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
ROCK (Rock or disco music) +03 +01 ON
CLASSIC (Classical music)
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
3
4
Select a tone.
POPS (Light music)
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00
ON
[Turn] = [Press]
BASS Ô TREBLE
JAZZ (Jazz music)
+02 +03 OFF
Adjust the level.
Tone
Level
BASS
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
TREBLE
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
5
Finish the procedure.
12
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
demonstration
CLOCK DISP*1
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
:
:
• CLOCK ON
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
Clock display
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [6].
[Initial: 0:00]
• 24 HOUR
24H/12H
:
See also page 6 for setting.
Time display mode • 12 HOUR
CLOCK ADJ *2
Clock adjustment
• AUTO
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT
(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.
Cancels.
• OFF
EQ
:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*3
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
• TAG ON
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA
Tag display
tracks.
• TAG OFF
:
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Takes effect only when CT (clock time) data is received.
2
3
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Continued on the next page
SETTINGS 13
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
AF-REG *4
Alternative
frequency/
regionalization
reception
• AF ON
:
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station (the programme may differ
from the one currently received), [9].
• The AF indicator lights up.
When the currently received signals become weak, the
unit switches to another station broadcasting the same
programme.
• AF-REG ON
• OFF
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
Cancels.
PTY-STANDBY *4 PTY OFF, PTY
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes,
[9].
PTY standby
codes
TA VOLUME *4
Traffic
announcement
volume
VOLUME 00
Initial: VOLUME 15
– VOLUME 50
(or VOLUME 00
– VOLUME 30)*5
P-SEARCH *4
Programme search • SEARCH OFF
• SEARCH ON
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].
Cancels.
MONO*6
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but
stereo effect will be lost, [7].
• MONO OFF
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect
will remain.
• WIDE
:
COLOR 01
– COLOR 29,
USER
:
Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except T/P/
/0) illumination.
(See also page 16 for USER color settings.)
MENU COLOR
Menu color
• OFF
• ON
:
:
Cancels.
Changes the display and button (except T/P/
/0)
illumination during menu, list search and playback mode
operations.
4
5
6
*
*
*
Only for FM Radio Data System stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
14
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
FADER*7
Fader
R06 – F06
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE
Balance
L06 – R06
:
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
AUX ADJUST
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05
level adjustment
AUX ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source to external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control
panel.
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
TEL MUTING
Telephone
muting
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• MUTING OFF
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a
cellular phone.
Cancels.
:
AMP GAIN*8
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*9
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
AUX IN*10
Auxiliary input • AUX ON
• AUX OFF
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
7
8
*
*
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
9
*
*
10
SETTINGS 15
Color settings (for KD-R33)
Creating your own color
—USER Color
You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or
“NIGHT COLOR.”
DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER OFF.”
NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to
“DIMMER ON.”
5
6
Select a primary color.
[Turn] = [Press]
Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected
primary color.
1
[Turn] = [Press]
2
3
4
Select “COLOR” = “USER.”
[Turn] = [Press]
If “00” is selected for all the primary colors, display
appears dim.
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary
colors.
While “USER” is shown on the display...
Exit from the setting.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
[Turn] = [Press]
16 SETTINGS
More about this unit
FM Radio Data System operations
Basic operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types
of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme
Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)
to work correctly. Without receiving these data
correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not
operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower
than the preset level.
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. On the other hand,
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. (See page 14.)
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA
formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 17
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD
(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
Menu operations
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
18
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 15).
• Display appears dim.
Check the USER Color settings (see page 16).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 15).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 19
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
20
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 21
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
12 dB at 100 Hz
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
Treble:
12 dB at 10 kHz
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
65 dB
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
MW Tuner
LW Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
Sensitivity:
50 μV
22
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 23
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts
Затруднения при эксплуатации?
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на
соответствующую страницу
Αντιµετωπίζετε ΠΡΟΒΛΗΜΑΤΑ λειτουργίας;
Εκτελέστε επαναφορά της µονάδας
Ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα “Επαναφορά της µονάδας”
Dear Customer,
Уважаемый клиент.
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
Данное устройство соответствует действительным
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной
совместимости и электрической безопасности.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,
Limited в Европе:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Germany
Германия
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,
Αγαπητέ πελάτη,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.
η συσκευή αυτή συμμορφώνεται με τις ισχύουσες Ευρωπαϊκές
Οδηγίες και πρότυπα σχετικά με την ηλεκτρομαγνητική
συμβατότητα και την ασφάλεια από ηλεκτρισμό.
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,
Limited ist:
Ο Ευρωπαϊκός αντιπρόσωπος της Victor Company of Japan,
Limited είναι:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland
Γερμανία
EN, GE, RU, GR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0908DTSMDTJEIN
KD-R303/KD-R302/KD-R301/KD-R33
Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Руководство по установке/подключению
Εγꢀειρίδιo εγκατάστασης/συνδέσεων
0908DTSMDTJEIN
EN, GE, RU, GR
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0568-013A
[EY]
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
РУССКИЙ
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации Η συσκευή αυτή είναι σχεδιασµένη να λειτoυργεί
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your
Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung
на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом σε ηλεκτρικά συστήµατα oχηµάτων στα 12 V
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über diese
is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-
CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
на массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой
системы, требуется инвертор напряжения,
который может быть приобретен у дилера
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
DC, µε ΑΡΝΗΤΙΚΗ γείωση. Εάν τo όχηµά σας
δεν ανήκει στην κατηγoρία αυτή, θα χρειαστείτε
ένα µετατρoπέα τάσης, τoν oπoίo µπoρείτε
να πρoµηθευτείτε από τoυς αντιπρoσώπoυς
συστηµάτων ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC.
Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der
bei JVC Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.
WARNINGS
WARNUNGEN
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ
ΠΡΟΦΥΛΑΞΕΙΣ
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir,
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы
рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный
разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все
Για την απoτρoπή τυχόν βραχυκυκλωµάτων,
συνιστoύµε να απoσυνδέετε τoν αρνητικό πόλo
της µπαταρίας και να κάνετε όλες τις ηλεκτρικές
συνδέσεις πριν από την εγκατάσταση της συσκευής.
• Βεβαιωθείτε ότι θα γειώσετε τη συσκευή
αυτή στo αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoς ξανά µετά
την εγκατάσταση.
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen
all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s
chassis again after installation.
und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor das
Gerät eingebaut wird.
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau
a Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.
подключения перед установкой устройства.
• После установки обязательно заземлите
данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating.
Hinweise:
Примечания:
If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN- • Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим
предохранителем указанного класса.
Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего
специалиста JVC.
Σηµειώσεις:
CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.
• Εάν καεί η ασφάλεια, αντικαταστήστε την
µε καινoύργια των ίδιων oνoµαστικών
χαρακτηριστικών. Εάν η ασφάλεια καίγεται συχνά,
συµβoυλευθείτε τoν αντιπρόσωπo συστηµάτων
ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers
with maximum power of more than 50 W (both
at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit
4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the
speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
einer Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W
anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne,
mit einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die
Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen
Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um Schäden an den
Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 15 der
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die
Anschlußklemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN
Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr
heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf achten, das
Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с
максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к
задней и передней панели устройства, с
полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω).
Если максимальная мощность динамиков
менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “AMP GAIN”,
чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).
• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания
заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы
изолирующей лентой.
• Συνιστάται να συνδέετε ηχεία µέγιστης ισχύoς
πάνω από 50 W (τόσo πίσω όσo και µπρoστά,
µε σύνθετη αντίσταση 4 Ω έως 8 Ω). Εάν η
µέγιστη ισχύς των ηχείων είναι µικρότερη από
50 W, αλλάξτε τη ρύθµιση “AMP GAIN” (Απoλαβή
ενισχυτή) για να απoτρέψετε ενδεχόµενη
καταστρoφή τoυς (βλ. σελίδα 15 στις O∆ΗΓΙΕΣ).
• Για να απoτρέψετε τυχόν βραχυκυκλώµατα,
καλύπτετε τoυς ακρoδέκτες των καλωδίων ΠOΥ ∆Ε
XΡΗΣΙΜOΠOΙΕΙΤΕ µε µoνωτική ταινία.
• Η ψύκτρα ζεσταίνεται πoλύ κατά τη χρήση.
Πρoσέχετε να µην την αγγίξετε καθώς αφαιρείτε τη
συσκευή.
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно
нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во
время удаления устройства.
Heat sink / Abstrahlblech
Радиатор / Ψύκτρα
PRECAUTIONS on power supply
and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the
power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the
unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the
power cord to the speakers, check the speaker
wiring in your car.
VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по
ΠΡOΦΥΛΑΞΕΙΣ κατά τις συνδέσεις
τρoφoδoσίας ρεύµατoς και
ηχείων:
• ΜΗ συνδέετε τα καλώδια ηχείων της
συσκευής µε την µπαταρία τoυ oχήµατoς,
διότι ενδέχεται να πρoκληθεί σoβαρή ζηµιά
στη συσκευή.
Anschließen der Stromversorgung питанию и подключению
und Lautsprecher:
громкоговорителей:
• НЕ подключайте провода
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels
NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da
sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen
des Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die
громкоговорителей к аккумулятору
автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов
громкоговорителей к кабелю питания
громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений
громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.
• ΠΡOΤOΥ συνδέσετε τα καλώδια ηχείων της
συσκευής µε τα ηχεία, ελέγξτε την καλωδίωση των
ηχείων τoυ oχήµατoς.
Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem
Auto überprüfen.
Parts list for installation and
connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If
any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.
Teileliste für den Einbau und
Anschluß
Список деталей для установки и Κατάλoγoς εξαρτηµάτων για την
подключения
εγκατάσταση και τις συνδέσεις
Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте
Η συσκευή αυτή συνoδεύεται από τα εξαρτήµατα
πoυ αναφέρoνται κατωτέρω. Αν λείπει κάποιο
στοιχείο, συμβουλευτείτε αμέσως τον αντιπρόσωπο
συστημάτων ψυχαγωγίας οχημάτων της JVC.
Gerät geliefert. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich с устройством. При отсутствии какого-либо
sofort an Ihren JVC-Autoradiohändler.
элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером
автомобильного специалиста JVC.
A / B
C
D
Hard case (only for KD-R33)/Control
panel
Etui (nur für KD-R33)/Schalttafel
Жесткий футляр (только для KD-R33)/
Панель управления
Sleeve
Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Декоративную панель
∆ιακoσµητικό πλαίσιo
Halterung
Муфта
Βάση
Πρoστατευτική άκαµπτη θήκη (μόνο για το
KD-R33)/Πρόσoψη
E
F
G
Power cord
Stromkable
Кабель питания
∆έσµη καλωδίων ρεύµατoς
Washer (ø5)
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)
Шайба (њ5)
Ρoδέλα (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Sicherungsmutter (M5)
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)
Ασφαλιστικό παξιµάδι (M5)
H
I
J
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)
Befestigungsschraube (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)
Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12,5 мм)
Βίδα στερέωσης (M4 × 5mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)
Rubber cushion
Gummipuffer
Резиновый чехол
Ελαστικό παρέµβυσµα
Handles
Griffe
Рычаги
Κλειδιά
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH
MOUNTING)
EINBAU
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗ
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
(ΤOΠOΘΕΤΗΣΗ ΣΤO ΤΑΜΠΛΩ)
The following illustration shows a typical
installation. If you have any questions or require
information regarding installation kits, consult
your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a
company supplying kits.
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen
Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie
Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes brauchen, касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему
wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder
ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.
• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts
nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem qualifizierten
Techniker einbauen.
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая Η εικόνα πoυ ακoλoυθεί απεικoνίζει µια τυπική
установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, εγκατάσταση. Για oπoιαδήπoτε απoρία σας ή
για περισσότερες πληρoφoρίες σχετικά µε κιτ
εγκατάστασης, απευθυνθείτε στoν αντιπρόσωπo
συστηµάτων ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC ή σε
εταιρείες πoυ παρέχoυν τέτoια κιτ.
• Εάν έχετε αµφιβoλίες σχετικά µε τη σωστή
εγκατάσταση της συσκευής αυτής, αναθέστε την
εγκατάστασή της σε κατάλληλα εκπαιδευµένo τεχνικό.
дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в
компанию, поставляющую соответствующие
принадлежности.
• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует
устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к
квалифицированному специалисту.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit
correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Do the required electrical connections.
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen Anschlüsse vor.
Выполните необходимые подключения контактов,
как показано на оборотной стороне этой
инструкции.
Κάντε τις αναγκαίες ηλεκτρικές συνδέσεις.
For KD-R33
Bei KD-R33
Для KD-R33
Για το KD-R33
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve
firmly in place.
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.
Отогните соответствующие фиксаторы,
предназначенные для прочной
установки корпуса.
Λυγίστε τις κατάλληλες γλωττίδες για να
συγκρατηθεί η βάση σταθερά στη θέση της.
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Ausbau des Geräts
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil
freigeben.
Удаление устройства
Перед удалением устройства освободите
заднюю часть.
Αφαίρεση της συσκευής
Πρoτoύ αφαιρέσετε τη συσκευή, απασφαλίστε τo
πίσω µέρoς.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated
so that the unit can be removed.
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen
wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät
entfernt werden kann.
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.
Εισαγάγετε τις δύo λαβές και κατόπιν τραβήξτε τις,
όπως φαίνεται στην εικόνα, µε τρόπo ώστε να είναι
δυνατή η αφαίρεση της συσκευής.
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der
Anker-Option / При использовании дополнительной
стойки / Όταν χρησιµoπoιείτε τo πρoαιρετικό στήριγµα
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты / Όταν
τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή χωρίς χρήση της βάσης
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Stay (option)
Anker (Option)
Стойка (дополнительно)
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.
Στα oχήµατα της Toyota, για παράδειγµα, πρώτα πρέπει να αφαιρέσετε τo ραδιόφωνo και κατόπιν να τoπoθετήσετε τη συσκευή στη
Γωνιακό στήριγµα (πρoαιρετικό)
Fire wall
θέση τoυ.
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Feuerwand
Стена
∆ιαχωριστικό τoίχωµα
µηχανής
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Πλακέ βίδες (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Armaturenbrett
Приборная панель
Ταµπλώ
Bracket*2 / Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2
Γλωττίδα στερέωσης*2
/
/
Screw (option)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Πλακέ βίδες (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Schraube (Option)
Винт (дополнительно)
Βίδα (πρoαιρετική)
Pocket / Taschen /
Карман / Εσoχή
Bracket*2 / Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2 / Γλωττίδα στερέωσης*2
Note
:
:
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von
weniger als 30˚ auf.
Hinweis
Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden.
Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.
При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.
Τoπoθετήστε τη µoνάδα υπό γωνία µικρότερη
των 30°.
Σηµείωση
:
Όταν τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή στo στήριγµα στερέωσης, βεβαιωθείτε ότι θα χρησιµoπoιήσετε τις βίδες
µήκoυς 8 mm. Εάν χρησιµoπoιήσετε µακρύτερες βίδες, ενδέχεται να πρoκαλέσετε ζηµιά στη συσκευή.
1
2
1
1
1
2
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage
the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die
Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом,
чтобы не повредить предохранитель,
расположенный сзади.
*
*
Όταν τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή σε όρθια θέση,
πρoσέχετε να µην πρoκαλέσετε ζηµιά στην ασφάλεια
πoυ βρίσκεται στo πίσω µέρoς της συσκευής.
∆ε συµπεριλαµβάνoνται στη συσκευασία της
συσκευής αυτής.
2
2
Hе входит в комплект поставки.
2
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
РУССКИЙ
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΚΕΣ ΣΥΝ∆ΕΣΕΙΣ
If your car is equipped with the ISO
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- oder Opel-
(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall) / Για
ορισμένα αυτοκίνητα VW
A
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если
автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO / Εάν
τо óχηµά σας διαθέτει σύνδεσµо ISO
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
Ενδέχεται να χρειαστεί να τρоπоπоιήσετε την καλωδίωση της παρεχóµενης δέσµης καλωδίων ρεύµατоς, σύµφωνα µε την εικóνα.
• Πρоτоύ εγκαταστήσετε τη συσκευή αυτή, απευθυνθείτε στоν εξоυσιоδоτηµένо αντιπρóσωπо τоυ оχήµατóς σας.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.
• Συνδέστε τоυς συνδέσµоυς ISO σύµφωνα µε την εικóνα.
From the car body
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /
Исходная схема соединений / Αρχική καλωδίωση
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /
Преобразованная схема соединений 1 / Τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 1
Von der
A
C
B
D
Fahrzeugkarosserie
От корпуса автомобиля
Απó τо αµάξωµα τоυ
оχήµατоς
E
F
G
H
ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder
Разъем ISO
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on. / Verwenden Sie die modifizierte
Verdrahtung 2 wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet. / Если приемник не включается,
используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2. / Εάν η συσκευή δεν
τίθεται σε λειτоυργία, χρησιµоπоιήστε την τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 2.
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
I
J
L
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в
комплект поставки
Σύνδεσµоς ISO
K
M
O
N
P
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 / Преобразованная схема
соединений 2 / Τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 2
Σύνδεσµоς ISO της δέσµης καλωδίων της συσκευής
Y: Yellow
Gelb
Желтый
Κίτρινо
R: Red
View from the lead side
Rot
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen
Вид со стороны выводов
Красный
Κóκκινо
Όψη απó την πλευρά των καλωδίων
Connections without using the ISO connector / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung des ISO-Steckverbinders / Подключение без использования
разъема ISO / Συνδέσεις χωρίς τη χρήση των συνδέσμων ISO
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug
sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können
ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно
проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное
подключение может привести к серьезному
повреждению устройства.
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от
кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
Πριν απó τη σύνδεση: Ελέγξτε πρоσεκτικά την
καλωδίωση τоυ оχήµατоς. Η τυχóν εσφαλµένη σύνδεση
είναι δυνατó να πρоκαλέσει σоβαρή ζηµιά στη συσκευή.
Τα καλώδια της δέσµης καλωδίων ρεύµατоς της
συσκευής ενδέχεται να µην έχоυν τо ίδιо χρώµα µε τα
καλώδια τоυ συνδέσµоυ τоυ оχήµατоς.
carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the
connector from the car body may be different in color. im Fahrzeug können sich farblich unterscheiden.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses
1
Cut the ISO connector.
Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the
order specified in the illustration below.
1
Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.
Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge
anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.
1
2
Обрежьте разъем ISO.
1
2
Κóψτε τоν συνδετήρα ISO.
2
2
Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания
в указанном ниже порядке.
Συνδέστε τα χρωµατιστά καλώδια τη δέσµης
ς
καλωδίων ρεύµατоς, µε τη σειρά πоυ καθоρίζεται
3
4
Connect the aerial cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3
4
Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.
στην εικóνα ανωτέρω.
3
4
Подключите кабель антенны.
3
4
Συνδέστε τо оµоαξоνικó καλώδιо τη
ς
κεραία
ς.
В последнюю очередь подключите
электропроводку к устройству.
Τέλо
ς
, συνδέστε τо βύσµα τη
ς
δέσµης καλωδίων
ρεύµατо
ς
στη συσκευή.
Rear line out (see diagram
Hinterer Line-Ausgang (siehe Schaltplan
Разъем “line out” заднего динамика (см. схему
Πίσω έξοδος line out (βλ. σχεδιάγραµµα
)
Rear ground terminal / Hintere Erdungsc-
anschlußklemme / Задний разъем заземления /
Ακρoδέκτης γείωσης στo πίσω µέρoς της συσκευής
)
)
)
15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Предохранитель 15 A
Ασφάλεια 15 A
Aerial terminal
Antennen-
anschlußklemme
Разъем антенны
Ακρoδέκτης κεραίας
Black
Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Переключатель
зажигания
∆ιακóπτης της
µηχανής
Schwarz
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Черный
Μαύρo
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
Πρoς µεταλλικó πλαίσιo ή αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoς
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
Yellow*2
Gelb*2
Желтый*2
Κίτρινo*2
Πρoς ακρoδέκτη της ασφαλειoθήκης πoυ τρoφoδoτείται απ’ ευθείας απó την
µπαταρία τoυ oχήµατoς (παρακάµπτoντας τo διακóπτη της µηχανής) (συνεχής
τρoφoδoσία 12 V)
Red
Rot
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Красный
Κóκκινo
Fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
Πρoς ακρoδέκτη της ασφαλειoθήκης πoυ τρoφoδoτείται απó τo
διακóπτη της µηχανής
Sicherungsblock
Блок предохранителя
Ασφαλειoθήκη
Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Синий с белой полосой
Μπλε µε λευκή ρίγα
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
Πρoς καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ άλλης συσκευής ή ηλεκτρική κεραία, εάν υπάρχει (200 mA τo πoλύ)
Brown
Braun
Коричневый
Καφέ
To cellular phone system
Zur Mobiltelefon
К системе сотового телефона
Πρoς σύστηµα κινητoύ τηλεφώνoυ
White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem
Streifen
White
Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen
Серый с черной полосой
Γκρι µε µαύρη ρίγα
Gray
Grau
Серый
Γκρι
Green with black stripe
Green
Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen
Пурпурный с черной
полосой
Purple
Lila
Weiß
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen
Зеленый с черной полосой
Πράσινo µε µαύρη ρίγα
Grün
Белый
Λευκó
Зеленый
Πράσινo
Пурпурный
Μωβ
Белый с черной
полосой
Μωβ µε µαύρη ρίγα
Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Правый громкоговоритель
(задний)
Left speaker (front)
Λευκó µε µαύρη ρίγα
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Левый громкоговоритель (передний)
Αριστερó ηχείo (µπρoστά)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Правый громкоговоритель (передний)
∆εξί ηχείo (µπρoστά)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Левый громкоговоритель (задний)
Αριστερó ηχείo (πίσω)
∆εξί ηχείo (πίσω)
1
1
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.
Перед проверкой работы устройства
подключите этот провод, иначе питание не
включится.
*
∆ε συµπεριλαµβάνoνται στη συσκευασία της συσκευής
αυτής.
Πρoτoύ ελέγξετε τη λειτoυργία της συσκευής, πριν απó
την εγκατάστασή της, θα πρέπει να συνδέσετε τo καλώδιo
αυτó, διαφoρετικά η συσκευή δε θα τεθεί σε λειτoυργία.
2
2
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise
the power cannot be turned on.
*
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit
des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung
angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung
nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.
*
2
*
3
C
Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя / Σύνδεση του εξωτερικού
ενισχυτοή
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre
Μπoρείτε να συνδέσετε έναν ενισχυτή για να
αναβαθµίσετε τo στερεoφωνικó σύστηµα τoυ
αυτoκινήτoυ σας.
• Συνδέστε τo καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ (µπλε µε
λευκή ρίγα) µε τo καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ της
άλλης συσκευής, για να µπoρείτε να ελέγχετε τη
δεύτερη µέσω της πρώτης.
• Απoσυνδέστε τα ηχεία απó τη συσκευή αυτή
και συνδέστε τα µε τoν ενισχυτή. Αφήστε
τα καλώδια ηχείων της συσκευής αυτής
ασύνδετα.
Можно подключить усилитель для обновления
автомобильной стереосистемы.
stereo system.
Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white
stripe) to the remote lead of the other
equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit
weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel des
anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses Gerät
gesteuert werden kann.
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства
(синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего
устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы
им можно было управлять с этого устройства.
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от
данного устройства, подключите
их к усилителю. Оставьте провода
громкоговорителей данного устройства
неиспользованными.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit,
connect them to the amplifier. Leave the
speaker leads of this unit unused.
• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät
abtrennen und am Verstärker anschließen.
Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts
unbenutzt lassen.
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
∆ιακλαδωτήρας (δε συμπεριλαμβάνoνται στη συσκευασία
τησ συσκευήσ αυτήσ)
Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Провод внешнего устройства
Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)
Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ (µπλε µε λευκή ρίγα)
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
Πρoς καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ άλλης συσκευής ή ηλεκτρική κεραία, εάν υπάρχει
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
Καλώδιo σήµατoς (δε συμπεριλαμβάνoνται στη
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
Hintere Lautsprecher
JVC Verstärker
Задние
громкоговорители
JVC-усилитель
Ενισχυτής JVC
Πίσω ηχεία
Rear speakers / Hintere Lautsprecher /
Задние громкоговорители / Πίσω ηχεία
Front speakers (see diagram
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan
Передние громкоговорители (см. схему
Εµπρóς ηχεία (βλ. σχεδιάγραµµα
)
)
)
)
3
3
3
3
*
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie
oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle
darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle
lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle,
bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der
*
*
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод
к металлическому кузову или шасси
автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску
перед тем, как прикреплять провод).
Невыполнение этого требования может
привести к повреждению данного устройства.
Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей
разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю.
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body
or to the chassis of the car—to the place not coated
with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint
before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO
connector and connect them to the amplifier.
*
Στερεώστε γερά τo καλώδιo γείωσης στo µεταλλικó
πλαίσιo ή τo αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoςσε σηµείo πoυ
δεν είναι βαµµένo (σε αντίθετη περίπτωση, ξύστε
τη βαφή πρoτoύ συνδέσετε τo καλώδιo). Αν δεν τo
κάνετε αυτó, είναι δυνατó να πρoκληθεί ζηµιά στη
συσκευή.
Κóψτε τα καλώδια των πίσω ηχείων απó τo
σύνδεσµo ISO τoυ oχήµατoς και συνδέστε τα στoν
ενισχυτή.
4
*
Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen
4
wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des
ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen
diese an den Verstärker an.
*
4
4
*
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ ΑΝΤΙΜΕΤΩΠΙΣΗ ΠΡOΒΛΗΜΑΤΩΝ
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
FEHLERSUCHE
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig
angeschlossen?
• Сработал предохранитель.
* Правильно ли подключены черный и
красный провода?
• Η ασφάλεια καίγεται.
* Είναι τo κόκκινo και τo µαύρo καλώδιo σωστά
συνδεδεµένα;
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Питание не включается.
* Подключен ли желтый провод?
• Η συσκευή δεν τίθεται σε λειτoυργία.
* Είναι τo κίτρινo καλώδιo συνδεδεµένo;
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet
werden.
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Звук не выводится через
громкоговорители.
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле
выхода громкоговорителей?
• ∆εν παράγεται ήχoς στα ηχεία.
* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι
βραχυκυκλωµένo;
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
• Sound is distorted.
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
• O ήχoς παράγεται µε παραµόρφωση.
* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι
γειωµένo;
* Μήπως oι ακρoδέκτες “–” των αριστερών (L) και
των δεξιών (R) ηχείων είναι γειωµένoι σε κoινό
σηµείo;
• Ton verzerrt.
• Звук искажен.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода
громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и
левого (L) громкоговорителей?
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s
chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren
und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis
angeschlossen?
• This unit becomes hot.
• Шум мешает звучанию.
•
O θόρυβoς πρoκαλεί παρεµβoλές στoυς
παραγόµενoυς ήχoυς.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим
заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью
более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
* Είναι o πίσω ακρoδέκτης γείωσης συνδεδεµένoς
µε τo αµάξωµα τoυ αυτoκινήτoυ µε κoντύτερo και
παχύτερo καλώδιo;
• Gerät wird heiß.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Устройство нагревается.
* Заземлен ли провод выхода
громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и
левого (L) громкоговорителей?
• Η συσκευή ζεσταίνεται πoλύ.
* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι
γειωµένo;
* Μήπως oι ακρoδέκτες “–” των αριστερών (L) και
των δεξιών (R) ηχείων είναι γειωµένoι σε κoινό
σηµείo;
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt
nicht.
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?
• Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
• O δέκτης αυτός δεν λειτoυργεί καθόλoυ.
* Έχετε επαναφέρει τo δέκτη;
4
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-R304/KD-R204
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
0808DTSMDTJEIN
GET0566-001A
[UI]
EN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
MAINTENANCE
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
To keep discs clean
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
To play new discs
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
[European Union only]
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Unusual shape
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
PREPARATIONS
Detaching the control panel
How to reset your unit
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R304)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files
Basic operations
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be canceled.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
How to forcibly eject a disc
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up
to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files: encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format; an
inappropriate format; layer 1/2.
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Disc operations
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product
may not be recommended.
Basic settings
Enter Menu operation.
Select an item.
1
2
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
Set the clock
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio
CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA (for KD-R304) formats.
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once
to proceed to adjust the minute.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
1– EN
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Control panel
Remote controller—RM-RK50
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-R304
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].
• Confirm the selection [Press].
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].
• CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].
Select the source.
7 Installing battery
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Store out of reach of children.
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.
• Do not dispose of in fire.
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Detach the panel.
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.
Check the current clock time/other information. Return to the
See also “CLOCK DISP“ of “Menu operations.” previous menu.
Remote sensor (for KD-R304)
DO NOT expose to strong light.
Caution:
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.
1
*
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled in the Menu (See “Menu operations”).
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no disc is in the unit.
2
If the effectiveness of the remote controller decreases, replace the battery.
Display window
7 Features
Playback mode / item indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Disc indicator
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Selects the sound mode
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
• Source display
• Track number
• Folder number (for KD-R304)
• Time countdown indicator
Sound mode indicator
• Selects the source.
LOUD (loudness) indicator
• Changes the preset stations.
• KD-R304: Changes the folders of MP3/
WMA discs.
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed
briefly.
Tr (track) indicator
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM
stereo broadcast with sufficient
signal strength.
• Adjusts the volume level.
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
Disc information indicators
(for KD-R304)
Main display (time,
playback information)
Disc operations
Radio operations
• 4 / ¢
Eject disc.
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
Select “FM” or “AM.”
[Press] Go to the previous or next track.
[Hold] Reverse or fast-forward the track.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
• 5 / ∞ : KD-R304: Go to the previous or next folder (for MP3/WMA discs).
playback source.
Turn on the power.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
Insert disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO” =
“MONO ON”
(See also “Menu operations.”)
Selecting the playback modes
TRACK RPT
:
Repeats current track
MP3/WMA: Repeats current
folder
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost. (MO indicator lights up.)
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator goes off.
FOLDER RPT
(for KD-R304)
:
FOLDER RND
(for KD-R304)
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays
all tracks of current folder,
then tracks of next folders
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
REPEAT
∆
RANDOM
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select “RPT OFF”
or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Refer to table
on right
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Prohibiting disc ejection
Changing the display information
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM.
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset number “04”.
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or
CD or CD Text a WMA disc (for KD-R304)
Select preset number “04.”
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
A = B = Disc title/ A = B = Album name/
performer*1 = Track
title*1 = (back to the
beginning)
performer (folder name*2)
= Track title (file name*2)
= (back to the beginning)
Selecting a track/folder
A : The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
B : Clock with the current track number
Selecting preset station
• KD-R304: For MP3/WMA disc, select the desired folder,
then the desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG
DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and
file name appear.
2
or
External component operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary)
input jack on the control panel.
• Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT”
= “AUX IN” setting, see “Menu operations.”
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
3.5 mm stereo mini
plug (not supplied)
Portable audio player, etc.
2 – EN
Menu items Selectable settings
BEEP • BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone.
• BEEP OFF: Deactivates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5 • HIGH POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
• LOW POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less
Initial: Underlined
SETTINGS
Sound adjustments
Preset values
Indication (For)
than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
or
AM*6
• AM OFF: Disable “AM” in source selection.
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
OFF
• AM ON: Enable “AM” in source selection.
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
AUX IN*7
• AUX OFF: Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
• AUX ON: Enable “AUX IN” in source selection.
5
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level is set
higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Select “EQ”
6
7
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
+02 00
ON
*
*
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
+02 +03 OFF
TROUBLESHOOTING
* You can change “USER” settings and store as your own sound mode (see below).
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
Storing your own sound mode
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
1 Select a tone.
BASS Ô TREBLE
2 Adjust the Lever.
–06 to +06
3 Repeat 1 and 2 for the
other tone if necessary.
• This unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see “Menu
operations”).
While “USER”
is shown on
the display...
This mode will be canceled if
no operation is done for about
30 seconds.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see “Menu
operations”).
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for
recording.
Show the title entry screen.
• Disc can be neither played back nor
ejected.
• Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering
the title.
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
Select a character.
Finish the procedure.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
Menu operations
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
Initial: Underlined
Menu items Selectable settings
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
DEMO
• DEMO ON: The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for
about 20 seconds.
• DEMO OFF: Cancels.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON: The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the power
is turned off.
SPECIFICATIONS
CLOCK SET
EQ
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute. [Initial: 1:00]
CD player section
Audio amplifier section
Maximum Power Output:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Type:
Compact disc player
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
DIMMER
• DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination.
• DIMMER OFF: Cancels.
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
SCROLL*2
• SCROLL ONCE: Scrolls the displayed information once.
• SCROLL AUTO: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• SCROLL OFF: Cancels.
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
98 dB
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Less than measurable limit
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
Tone Control Range: Bass:
Treble: 12 dB at 10 kHz
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
12 dB at 100 Hz
[For KD-R304]
MP3 Decoding Format:
TAG DISPLAY • TAG ON: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
(for KD-R304)
MONO*3
• TAG OFF: Cancels.
• MONO ON: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost.
• MONO OFF: Restore the stereo effect.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
IF BAND
• AUTO: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between adjacent stations.
(Stereo effect may be lost.)
• WIDE: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be
degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal: AUX (auxiliary) input jack
General
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
FADER*4
BALANCE
LOUD
R06 – F06: Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]
Tuner section
Grounding System:
Negative ground
Frequency Range:
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
L06 – R06: Adjust the left and right speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
Panel Size (approx.):
• LOUD OFF: Cancels.
• LOUD ON: Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume
level.
[FM Tuner]
AUX ADJUST AUX ADJ 00 – AUX ADJ 05: Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source to external component connected to the AUX input jack on
the control panel.
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
Mass (approx.):
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “CLOCK
OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
2
3
4
*
*
*
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
3 – EN
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,
consult your JVC car audio dealer.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see
“Menu operations”).
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and
thicker cords?
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
* Have you reset your unit?
Parts list for installation and connection
Å Control panel ..........................................................................................1
ı Hard case (for KD-R304)..........................................................................1
Ç Sleeve .....................................................................................................1
Î Trim plate ...............................................................................................1
‰ Power cord..............................................................................................1
Ï Washer (ø5) ............................................................................................1
Ì Lock nut (M5)..........................................................................................1
Ó Mounting bolt—M4 x 5 mm; M5 x 12.5 mm..........................................1
È Rubber cushion .......................................................................................1
Ô Handles...................................................................................................2
Remote controller (for KD-R304).............................................................1
Ò Battery (for KD-R304)..............................................................................1
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
In dash-mounting
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Rear line out
Rear ground terminal
15 A fuse
Antenna
terminal
When you stand the unit, be careful not
to damage the fuse on the rear.
Do the required electrical
connections.
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body
or chassis of the car
For KD-R304
Use the front speaker lead if your speaker
system is two-speaker system.
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting
to the car battery
Yellow *2
White with black stripe
(bypassing the ignition
switch) (constant 12 V)
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly
in place.
Front speaker
(left)
White
Fuse block
Red
Gray with black stripe
To an accessory terminal
in the fuse block
Gray
Front speaker
(right)
Removing the unit
Green with black stripe
Blue
To the automatic antenna if any
(250 mA max.)
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Rear speaker
(left)
Green
Blue with white
stripe
Purple with black stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment
(200 mA max.)
Rear speaker
(right)
Purple
Connecting the external amplifier
Remote lead
Y-connector *1
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
When using the optional stay
To the remote lead of
other equipment or
automatic antenna
if any
Stay (option)
Fire wall
JVC Amplifier
Rear
speakers
Signal cord *1
Dashboard
Front speakers
Install the unit at an angle of less
than 30˚.
Screw (option)
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot
be turned on.
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
3
*
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm*
Bracket*
Flat type screws
—M5 × 8 mm*
Pocket
Bracket*
4 – EN
CD RECEIVER KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0564-001A
[U/UH]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
[European Union only]
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to
avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
2
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
OPERATIONS
Basic operations...........................................
• Using the control panel...............................
• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......
Preparation..................................................
Listening to the radio...................................
Disc operations.............................................
4
4
6
7
8
9
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Listening to the other external
components.............................................. 10
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
SETTINGS
Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 11
Title assignment .......................................... 12
Menu operations.......................................... 13
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
REFERENCES
More about this unit .................................... 15
Troubleshooting........................................... 17
Maintenance................................................ 19
Specifications............................................... 20
3
Basic operations
Using the control panel
1
2
• FM/AM: Select preset station.
• CD: Select folder (for KD-R306/KD-R305).
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
Select the source.
FM = AM*1 = CD*2 = AUX IN*1 = (back to
the beginning)
8
9
p
q
w
Eject disc.
Select the sound.
Detach the panel.
Change the display information.
• FM/AM: Search for station.
• CD: Select track.
Return to the previous menu.
Remote sensor (for KD-R306/KD-R305)
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
3
e
r
t
4
5
• Enter list operations.
• Enter Menu setting [Hold].
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].*3
• Confirm the selection [Press].*3
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].*3
• CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].*3
Loading slot
1
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled
in the Menu (see “Menu operations” on page 14).
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no
disc is in the unit.
2
*
6
7
3
Display window
*
Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.
4
Display window
1
2
Tr (track) indicator
7
Disc information indicators (for KD-R306/
KD-R305)—TAG (Tag information), (track/
file), (folder)
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Time countdown indicator
DISC indicator
Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,
ROCK, POPS, USER
3
4
8
9
Main display
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),
MO (monaural)
5
6
EQ (equalizer) indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
p
OPERATIONS
5
Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-R306/KD-R305
Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)
Caution:
1
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Changes the preset stations.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.
Adjusts the volume level.
Selects the sound mode.
Selects the source.
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
2
3
4
5
6
If the effectiveness of the remote controller
decreases, replace the battery.
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such
as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long
time.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,
or dispose of it in a fire.
Remote sensor
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
6
Preparation
Cancel the display demonstration and set the clock
• See also page 13.
Turn on the power.
1
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust
the minute.
[Turn] = [Press]
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
When the power is turned off: Check the current clock time when “CLOCK DISP” is set to
“CLOCK OFF,” (see page 13)
When the power is turned on: Change the display information of the current source
FM/AM
CD
Station name*1 = Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)
Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*2 = Track title*2 = Current track number with the
elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time = (back
to the beginning)
MP3/WMA*4:
Album name/performer (folder name)*3 = Track title (file name)*3 =
Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track number
with the clock time = (back to the beginning)
1
*
*
*
If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 12.
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
KD-R306/KD-R305: If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG
OFF” (see page 13), folder name and file name appear.
2
3
4
*
For KD-R306/KD-R305.
OPERATIONS
7
Listening to the radio
Select “FM” or “AM.”
1
2
Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display,
then press it repeatedly.
• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, “ST”
lights up on the display.
When an FM stereo broadcast is
hard to receive
2
3
Select the preset number range you want to
store.
• See also page 14.
[Turn] = [Press]
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO”
= “MONO ON”
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
• “MO” lights up on the display.
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations
for AM.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset
number “P04.”
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator
goes off.
1
FM station automatic presetting
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
2
Select preset number “P04.”
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
1
While listening to a station...
3
8
Selecting preset station
or
[Turn] = [Press]
Disc operations
Turn on the power.
1
2
Insert a disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change
the source or eject the disc.
Stop playing and ejecting the disc
Selecting a track/folder
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Prohibiting disc ejection
[Turn] = [Press]
• KD-R306/KD-R305: For MP3/WMA discs, select the
desired folder, then the desired track by performing
the control dial.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you
to...
KD-R306/KD-R305
MP3/WMA: Select folder
[Press]Select track
[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track
Continued on the next page
OPERATIONS
9
Selecting the playback modes
REPEAT
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT*
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder
1
RANDOM
FOLDER RND*
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then
tracks of next folders
2
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
[Turn] = [Press]
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select
“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
REPEAT Ô RANDOM
3
* For KD-R306/KD-R305.
[Turn] = [Press]
Listening to the other external components
You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 14.
Select “AUX IN.”
1
Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.
—
2
3
Adjust the volume.
You can adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output
level (see “AUX ADJUST” on page 14).
Adjust the sound as you want (see page 11).
—
4
Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack
Portable audio player, etc.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
10 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre.
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
or
Selecting from Menu.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset values
3
4
Select a tone.
Indication (For)
USER (Flat sound)
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
00
00
OFF
[Turn] = [Press]
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF
BASS Ô TREBLE
Adjust the level.
ON
Tone
Level
BASS
TREBLE
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
5
Finish the procedure.
SETTINGS 11
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”
2
Show the title entry screen.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
3
Assign a title.
To erase the entire title
1
Select a character.
In step 2 above...
12
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
(For KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
Continued on the next page
SETTINGS 13
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
FADER*4
Fader
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE
Balance
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
AUX ADJUST
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05
level adjustment
AUX ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source to external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control
panel.
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*6
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
AUX IN*7
Auxiliary input • AUX ON
• AUX OFF
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files
of the same type as those detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 15
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
16
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 14).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 14).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 17
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
18
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 19
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
Treble:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
20
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-R306/KD-R305:
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 21
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, TH
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, TH
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-006A
[U/UH]
‰∑¬
ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫‰¥π√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧÿ ≥‰¡
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
§”‡µÕπ
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß
• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
À¡“¬‡Àµ
ÿ
Notes:
• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß
ÿ
¥π‡°«“ 50 W (∑ߥ“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂ß 8 Ω)
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√ ¥ À(¥π“ 14 §”·π–π”)
ÿ
• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑ ˉ¡·„™≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø
Ë
• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫π
ÿ
Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
•
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–√‰∫¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°
• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧ ≥‡„√À¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ
ÿ
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫Àπ“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√
ÿ
≥“°ª…√“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Sleeve
Trim plate
Power cord
≈ß∫√√® ( ”À√∫ KD-R306 À√Õ KD-R305)/À𓪥
ÿ
ª≈Õ°À
ÿ
¡
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
≈°µ¥ (M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 12.5 ¡¡.)
Rubber cushion
¬“ß°π°√–·∑°
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / ”À√∫ KD-R306 À√Õ KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
§π∫ߧ∫
Remote controller
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈
Battery
·∫µ‡µÕ√
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…
• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ߺ‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
Do the required electrical connections.
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
”À√∫ KD-R306 À√Õ KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
„ §π∫ߧ∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ
„À‡≈Õπ™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡„™ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑
Stay (option)
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
Fire wall
ºπß°π‰ø
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Dashboard
·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Screw (option)
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Pocket
°–‡ª“–
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“
À¡“¬‡Àµ
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ÿ ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥
1
2
*1 ‡¡Õ§
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ≥µß™ÿ
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
ÿ
2
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
°Õπ°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ: µ√«®¥°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø„π√∂¬πµ„À≈–‡Õ¬¥∂∂«π ‡æ√“–°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ∑º¥æ≈“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬
√“¬·√ßµÕ™
“¬µ–°«¢Õß “¬‰ø·≈–¢ÕßÕ
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»
¥“¬∑µÕ «π§«∫§
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫
ÿ
™¥‰¥π
ÿ
ª°√µ≥Õ‡™Õ¡®“°µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÕ“®¡ ∑‰¡‡À¡Õπ°π
„ªπ¥√“π≈“ß
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3
ÿ
ÿ
¡°“√π‡¥“¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫™¥π
ÿ
Rear line out (see diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
“¬ ≠≠“≥ÕÕ°¥“πÀ≈ß (¥·ºπ¿¡
)
®ÿ
¥Õ‡™¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß
15 A fuse
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A
Antenna terminal
¢« “¬Õ“°“»
Ignition switch
«∑™® ¥√–¥‡∫
ÿ
Black
¥”
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
Yellow *2
‡À≈Õß *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ
( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™® ¥√–¥‡∫) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)
ÿ
Fuse block
·ºßø«
Red
ᴧ
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«
Blue
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)
»ø“
Blue with white stripe
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA)
White with black stripe
Gray with black stripe
Gray
Green with black stripe
Green
Purple with black stripe
Purple
White
¢“«·∂∫¥”
‡∑“·∂∫¥”
‡∑“
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”
‡¢¬«
¡«ß·∂∫¥”
¡«ß
¢“«
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)
1
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™
¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫°πÕπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ
3
Connecting the external amplifier / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ°
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
§
ÿ
≥ “¡“√∂Õµ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æՇ桧
ÿ
≥ ¿“欇߄À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
ª°√Õ≥π Ê ‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ ¡‚¥ÿ¬™¥ª√–
• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕ
ÿ
ÿ
°Õ∫π‰¥
• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π·≈«µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õߢ¬“¬ ∑ß “¬µ–°«≈”‚æߢÕß™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫‰«π
ÿ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Remote lead
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫)π
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
µÕ “¬°∫Õ ª°√Õ≥πÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡
ÿ
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫)π
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπ“
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂
—µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√ ¥ÕÀ‡√ ¬À“¬‰¥
ÿ
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß
• ø« ¢“¥
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• ™ ¥ª√–°ÕÕ∫π√¢π
ÿ
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß
4
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-010A
[UT]
中文
ENGLISH
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。
系統,則需要 一個電
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
WARNINGS
警告
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
注意:
Notes:
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明書的第 14 頁。)
• 為防止電源短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
置
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• 本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。
Heat sink / 散熱片
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
用於安裝和連接的零件清單
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Sleeve
外套機殼
Trim plate
裝飾框
Power cord
電路連接用的配線束
硬盒(對應 KD-R306/KD-R305)/控制面
板
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
墊圈(ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
鎖定螺母(M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
橡膠防震墊
緊固
螺栓(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / 對應 KD-R306/KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
板條型把手
Remote controller
遙控器
Battery
電池
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
下面
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。
Do the required electrical connections.
進行所需的電路連接。
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
對應 KD-R306/KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固
在儀表板內。
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
拆卸本機
在拆卸本機前
,應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然
後輕穩地從兩側向
外拉兩片把手,本機隨
之拉出。
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置
。
Stay (option)
支撐架(選用的)
Fire wall
防火板
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
儀表板
Bracket*2
托座*2
Screw (option)
螺絲釘(選用的)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
空殼
Bracket*2
托座*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度
。
could damage the unit.
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。
不隨本機提供。
2
2
ENGLISH
中文
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
電路連接
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源
線的顏色導線。
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
2 將天線的電線連接起來。
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。
Rear line out (see diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
本機後背線性輸出端子(參閱圖表 ) 本機後背接地端子
15 A fuse
15 A 保險
絲
Antenna terminal
天線端子
Ignition switch
點火開關
Black
黑色
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤
Yellow *2
黃色 *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)
Fuse block
保險 絲單元
Red
紅色
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子
Blue
藍色
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)
White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋
Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋
Gray
灰色
Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋
Green
綠色
Purple with black stripe
紫色帶有黑色條紋
Purple
紫色
White
白色
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
右揚聲器(後置
左揚聲器(前
置
)
右揚聲器(前
置
)
左揚聲器(後置
)
)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
不隨本機提供。
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
檢查之前
,必須把這導線接上,否則
不能開啟電源
。
3
Connecting the external amplifier / 連接至外部功率放大器
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行
遙控。
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。
車的音響系統。
•
Remote lead
遙控導線
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)
JVC Amplifier
Rear speakers
JVC 功率放大器
後置
揚聲器
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
信號導線(不隨本機提供)
Front speakers
揚聲器
前
置
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電
線前,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。
TROUBLESHOOTING
故障排除
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?
• 電源不能接通。
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• 聲音失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 噪音干擾音響。
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚
的電線連接?
• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 本機完全不能操作。
* 您是否已經重
置您的機組?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre.
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
or
Selecting from Menu.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset values
3
4
Select a tone.
Indication (For)
USER (Flat sound)
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
00
00
OFF
[Turn] = [Press]
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF
BASS Ô TREBLE
Adjust the level.
ON
Tone
Level
BASS
TREBLE
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
5
Finish the procedure.
SETTINGS 11
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”
2
Show the title entry screen.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
3
Assign a title.
To erase the entire title
1
Select a character.
In step 2 above...
12
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
(For KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
Continued on the next page
SETTINGS 13
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
FADER*4
Fader
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE
Balance
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
AUX ADJUST
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05
level adjustment
AUX ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source to external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control
panel.
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*6
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
AUX IN*7
Auxiliary input • AUX ON
• AUX OFF
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files
of the same type as those detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 15
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
16
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 14).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 14).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 17
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
18
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 19
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
Treble:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
20
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-R306/KD-R305:
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 21
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Ada MASALAH dengan cara
pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-009A
[UN]
INDONESIA
ENGLISH
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-
penyalur audio mobil JVC.
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
PERINGATAN
WARNINGS
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Catatan:
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan unit ini.
Heat sink / Pendingin
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
Parts list for installation and connection
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer
audio mobil JVC anda.
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Kotak keras (untuk KD-R306/KD-R305)/Panel kontrol
Sleeve
Selongsong
Trim plate
Plat rapi
Power cord
Kabel power
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
Battery
Baterai
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang
berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan
listrik yang diperlukan.
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat
pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit
Memindahkan unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat
dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan
penguat tambahan
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa
menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada bagian
depan
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang unit pada suatu sudut kurang
dari 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Ketika memasang unit pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–8 mm. Jika
sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.
Catatan
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
2
2
2
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.
Rear line out (see diagram
Line out belakang (lihat diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
)
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
Black
Hitam
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
Yellow *2
Kuning *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Red
Merah
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
White
Putih
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui unit ini.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
Speaker-speaker
Penguat JVC
belakang
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• The fuse blows.
• Sekring putus.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted.
• Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Unit menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?
4
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre.
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
or
Selecting from Menu.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset values
3
4
Select a tone.
Indication (For)
USER (Flat sound)
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
00
00
OFF
[Turn] = [Press]
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF
BASS Ô TREBLE
Adjust the level.
ON
Tone
Level
BASS
TREBLE
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
5
Finish the procedure.
SETTINGS 11
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”
2
Show the title entry screen.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
3
Assign a title.
To erase the entire title
1
Select a character.
In step 2 above...
12
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
(For KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
Continued on the next page
SETTINGS 13
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
FADER*4
Fader
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE
Balance
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
AUX ADJUST
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05
level adjustment
AUX ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source to external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control
panel.
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*6
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
AUX IN*7
Auxiliary input • AUX ON
• AUX OFF
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files
of the same type as those detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 15
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
16
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 14).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 14).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 17
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
18
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 19
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
Treble:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
20
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-R306/KD-R305:
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 21
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Ada MASALAH dengan cara
pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-009A
[UN]
INDONESIA
ENGLISH
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-
penyalur audio mobil JVC.
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
PERINGATAN
WARNINGS
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Catatan:
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan unit ini.
Heat sink / Pendingin
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
Parts list for installation and connection
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer
audio mobil JVC anda.
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Kotak keras (untuk KD-R306/KD-R305)/Panel kontrol
Sleeve
Selongsong
Trim plate
Plat rapi
Power cord
Kabel power
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
Battery
Baterai
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang
berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan
listrik yang diperlukan.
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat
pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit
Memindahkan unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat
dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan
penguat tambahan
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa
menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada bagian
depan
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang unit pada suatu sudut kurang
dari 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Ketika memasang unit pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–8 mm. Jika
sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.
Catatan
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
2
2
2
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.
Rear line out (see diagram
Line out belakang (lihat diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
)
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
Black
Hitam
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
Yellow *2
Kuning *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Red
Merah
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
White
Putih
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui unit ini.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
Speaker-speaker
Penguat JVC
belakang
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• The fuse blows.
• Sekring putus.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted.
• Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Unit menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?
4
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-010A
[UT]
中文
ENGLISH
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。
系統,則需要 一個電
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
WARNINGS
警告
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
注意:
Notes:
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明書的第 14 頁。)
• 為防止電源短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
置
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• 本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。
Heat sink / 散熱片
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
用於安裝和連接的零件清單
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Sleeve
外套機殼
Trim plate
裝飾框
Power cord
電路連接用的配線束
硬盒(對應 KD-R306/KD-R305)/控制面
板
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
墊圈(ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
鎖定螺母(M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
橡膠防震墊
緊固
螺栓(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / 對應 KD-R306/KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
板條型把手
Remote controller
遙控器
Battery
電池
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
下面
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。
Do the required electrical connections.
進行所需的電路連接。
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
對應 KD-R306/KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固
在儀表板內。
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
拆卸本機
在拆卸本機前
,應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然
後輕穩地從兩側向
外拉兩片把手,本機隨
之拉出。
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置
。
Stay (option)
支撐架(選用的)
Fire wall
防火板
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
儀表板
Bracket*2
托座*2
Screw (option)
螺絲釘(選用的)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
空殼
Bracket*2
托座*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度
。
could damage the unit.
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。
不隨本機提供。
2
2
ENGLISH
中文
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
電路連接
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源
線的顏色導線。
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
2 將天線的電線連接起來。
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。
Rear line out (see diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
本機後背線性輸出端子(參閱圖表 ) 本機後背接地端子
15 A fuse
15 A 保險
絲
Antenna terminal
天線端子
Ignition switch
點火開關
Black
黑色
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤
Yellow *2
黃色 *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)
Fuse block
保險 絲單元
Red
紅色
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子
Blue
藍色
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)
White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋
Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋
Gray
灰色
Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋
Green
綠色
Purple with black stripe
紫色帶有黑色條紋
Purple
紫色
White
白色
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
右揚聲器(後置
左揚聲器(前
置
)
右揚聲器(前
置
)
左揚聲器(後置
)
)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
不隨本機提供。
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
檢查之前
,必須把這導線接上,否則
不能開啟電源
。
3
Connecting the external amplifier / 連接至外部功率放大器
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行
遙控。
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。
車的音響系統。
•
Remote lead
遙控導線
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)
JVC Amplifier
Rear speakers
JVC 功率放大器
後置
揚聲器
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
信號導線(不隨本機提供)
Front speakers
揚聲器
前
置
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電
線前,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。
TROUBLESHOOTING
故障排除
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?
• 電源不能接通。
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• 聲音失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 噪音干擾音響。
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚
的電線連接?
• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 本機完全不能操作。
* 您是否已經重
置您的機組?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-010A
[UT]
中文
ENGLISH
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。
系統,則需要 一個電
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
WARNINGS
警告
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
注意:
Notes:
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明書的第 14 頁。)
• 為防止電源短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
置
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• 本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。
Heat sink / 散熱片
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
用於安裝和連接的零件清單
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Sleeve
外套機殼
Trim plate
裝飾框
Power cord
電路連接用的配線束
硬盒(對應 KD-R306/KD-R305)/控制面
板
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
墊圈(ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
鎖定螺母(M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
橡膠防震墊
緊固
螺栓(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / 對應 KD-R306/KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
板條型把手
Remote controller
遙控器
Battery
電池
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
下面
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。
Do the required electrical connections.
進行所需的電路連接。
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
對應 KD-R306/KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固
在儀表板內。
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
拆卸本機
在拆卸本機前
,應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然
後輕穩地從兩側向
外拉兩片把手,本機隨
之拉出。
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置
。
Stay (option)
支撐架(選用的)
Fire wall
防火板
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
儀表板
Bracket*2
托座*2
Screw (option)
螺絲釘(選用的)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
空殼
Bracket*2
托座*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度
。
could damage the unit.
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。
不隨本機提供。
2
2
ENGLISH
中文
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
電路連接
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源
線的顏色導線。
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
2 將天線的電線連接起來。
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。
Rear line out (see diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
本機後背線性輸出端子(參閱圖表 ) 本機後背接地端子
15 A fuse
15 A 保險
絲
Antenna terminal
天線端子
Ignition switch
點火開關
Black
黑色
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤
Yellow *2
黃色 *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)
Fuse block
保險 絲單元
Red
紅色
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子
Blue
藍色
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)
White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋
Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋
Gray
灰色
Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋
Green
綠色
Purple with black stripe
紫色帶有黑色條紋
Purple
紫色
White
白色
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
右揚聲器(後置
左揚聲器(前
置
)
右揚聲器(前
置
)
左揚聲器(後置
)
)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
不隨本機提供。
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
檢查之前
,必須把這導線接上,否則
不能開啟電源
。
3
Connecting the external amplifier / 連接至外部功率放大器
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行
遙控。
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。
車的音響系統。
•
Remote lead
遙控導線
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)
JVC Amplifier
Rear speakers
JVC 功率放大器
後置
揚聲器
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
信號導線(不隨本機提供)
Front speakers
揚聲器
前
置
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電
線前,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。
TROUBLESHOOTING
故障排除
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?
• 電源不能接通。
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• 聲音失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 噪音干擾音響。
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚
的電線連接?
• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 本機完全不能操作。
* 您是否已經重
置您的機組?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
Selecting a preset sound mode
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre.
• See also page 13 (“EQ”).
Storing your own sound mode
You can store your own adjustments in memory.
1
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
or
Selecting from Menu.
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ” = “USER”
2
While “USER” is shown on the display...
[Turn] = [Press]
Select “EQ”
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the
operation will be canceled.
Preset value setting for each sound mode
Preset values
3
4
Select a tone.
Indication (For)
USER (Flat sound)
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
00
00
OFF
[Turn] = [Press]
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music) +02 00
JAZZ (Jazz music) +02 +03 OFF
BASS Ô TREBLE
Adjust the level.
ON
Tone
Level
BASS
TREBLE
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
5
Finish the procedure.
SETTINGS 11
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and
AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
1
Select “FM” or “AM.”
2
Show the title entry screen.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the title.
4
Finish the procedure.
3
Assign a title.
To erase the entire title
1
Select a character.
In step 2 above...
12
Menu operations
1
2
3
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu,
press BACK.
[Turn] = [Press]
Initial: Underlined
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
DEMO
Display
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].
Cancels.
demonstration • DEMO OFF
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON
Clock display
:
:
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5
seconds when the power is turned off, [7].
CLOCK SET
Clock setting
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].
[Initial: 1:00]
EQ
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Equalizer
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
DIMMER
Dimmer
• DIMMER ON
• DIMMER OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• SCROLL ONCE
• SCROLL AUTO
• SCROLL OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the
setting.
TAG DISPLAY
Tag display
(For KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
1
2
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
*
Continued on the next page
SETTINGS 13
Category Menu items
Selectable settings, [reference page]
MONO*3
Monaural mode
• MONO ON
:
Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo
effect will be lost, [8].
• MONO OFF
:
:
Restore the stereo effect.
IF BAND
Intermediate
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will
remain.
frequency band • WIDE
:
FADER*4
Fader
R06 – F06
L06 – R06
:
:
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
BALANCE
Balance
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.
[Initial: 00]
LOUD
Loudness
• LOUD OFF
• LOUD ON
:
:
Cancels.
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced
sound at a low volume level.
AUX ADJUST
Auxiliary input — AUX ADJ 05
level adjustment
AUX ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source to external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control
panel.
BEEP
Keypress tone
• BEEP OFF
• BEEP ON
:
:
Deactivates the keypress tone.
Activates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power
of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the
speaker.)
• HIGH POWER
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
AM*6
AM station
• AM OFF
• AM ON
:
:
Disable “AM” in source selection.
Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].
AUX IN*7
Auxiliary input • AUX ON
• AUX OFF
:
:
Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].
3
4
5
*
*
*
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level
set higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
6
7
*
*
14 SETTINGS
More about this unit
Basic operations
Disc operations
Turning on the power
Caution for DualDisc playback
• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also
starts.
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
General
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA (for
KD-R306/KD-R305) formats.
General
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-R306/KD-R305: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
• If you change the source while listening to a disc,
playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be
canceled.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-R306/KD-R305: This unit can only play back files
of the same type as those detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 15
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-R306/
KD-R305)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust. Playback starts automatically.
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Menu operations
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the
unit automatically changes the volume level to
“VOLUME 30.”
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
16
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see
page 14).
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see
page 14).
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately
on the display.
Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
Continued on the next page
REFERENCES 17
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
18
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
To keep discs clean
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
Connectors
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Transparent or semi-
transparent parts on its
recording area
REFERENCES 19
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
at no more than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
Treble:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
1 kΩ
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, Antenna input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
65 dB
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Sensitivity:
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
AM Tuner
20 μV
Selectivity:
35 dB
20
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-R306/KD-R305:
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Panel Size:
Mass:
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
REFERENCES 21
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Ada MASALAH dengan cara
pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0808DTSMDTJEIN
KD-R306/KD-R305/KD-R206/KD-R205
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
0808DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0564-009A
[UN]
INDONESIA
ENGLISH
Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-
penyalur audio mobil JVC.
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
PERINGATAN
WARNINGS
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Catatan:
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan unit ini.
Heat sink / Pendingin
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
Parts list for installation and connection
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer
audio mobil JVC anda.
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case (for KD-R306/KD-R305)/Control panel
Kotak keras (untuk KD-R306/KD-R305)/Panel kontrol
Sleeve
Selongsong
Trim plate
Plat rapi
Power cord
Kabel power
F
G
H
I
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
For KD-R306/KD-R305 / Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305
J
K
L
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
Battery
Baterai
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang
berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan
listrik yang diperlukan.
For KD-R306/KD-R305 /
Untuk KD-R306/KD-R305
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat
pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit
Memindahkan unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat
dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan
penguat tambahan
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa
menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada bagian
depan
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang unit pada suatu sudut kurang
dari 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Ketika memasang unit pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–8 mm. Jika
sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.
Catatan
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
2
2
2
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.
Rear line out (see diagram
Line out belakang (lihat diagram
)
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
)
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
Black
Hitam
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
Yellow *2
Kuning *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Red
Merah
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
White
Putih
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Penyambungan penguat eksternal
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui unit ini.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari unit ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan
ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
Speaker-speaker
Penguat JVC
belakang
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• The fuse blows.
• Sekring putus.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted.
• Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Unit menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?
4
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-R208
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.
Retain this information for future reference.
0808DTSMDTJEIN
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0558-001A
[J]
EN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
Basic operations
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc
play will start from where it had been stopped previously
next time you turn on the power.
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be canceled.
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
Caution
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up
to 128 characters
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product
may not be recommended.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio
CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.
[European Union only]
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
PREPARATIONS
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
To keep discs clean
How to reset your unit
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Detaching the control panel
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
To play new discs
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
How to forcibly eject a disc
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Basic settings
Enter Menu operation.
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
Unusual shape
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)
Select an item.
1
2
Cancel the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
Set the clock
Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour, then press control dial once
to proceed to adjust the minute.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1– EN
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Control panel
Remote controller—RM-RK50
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].
• Confirm the selection [Press].
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].
• CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].
7 Installing battery
Select the source.
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
• Store out of reach of children.
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.
• Do not dispose of in fire.
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.
Caution:
Detach the panel.
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.
Check the current clock time/other information. Return to the
Remote sensor
See also “CLOCK DISP“ of “Menu operations.” previous menu.
DO NOT expose to strong light.
If the effectiveness of the remote controller decreases, replace the battery.
1
*
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled in the Menu (See “Menu operations”).
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no disc is in the unit.
For USA-California Only: This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material—
special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
2
Display window
7 Features
Playback mode / item indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Disc indicator
Sound mode indicator
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Selects the sound mode
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
• Source display
• Track number
• Folder number
• Time countdown indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
• Selects the source.
• Changes the preset stations.
• Changes the folders of MP3/WMA discs.
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed
briefly.
Tr (track) indicator
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM
stereo broadcast with sufficient
signal strength.
• Adjusts the volume level.
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
Disc information indicators
Main display (time,
playback information)
Disc operations
Radio operations
• 4 / ¢
Eject disc.
Select “FM” or “AM.”
[Press] Go to the previous or next track.
[Hold] Reverse or fast-forward the track.
• 5 / ∞ : Go to the previous or next folder (for MP3/WMA discs).
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
Turn on the power.
Insert disc.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO” =
“MONO ON”
(See also “Menu operations.”)
Selecting the playback modes
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3/WMA: Repeats current
folder
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost. (MO indicator lights up.)
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator goes off.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all
tracks of current folder, then
tracks of next folders
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
REPEAT
∆
RANDOM
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select “RPT OFF”
or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Refer to table
on right
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Prohibiting disc ejection
Changing the display information
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM.
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset number “P04”.
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or
CD or CD Text a WMA disc
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
A = B = Disc title/ A = B = Album name/
Select preset number “P04.”
performer*1 = Track
title*1 = (back to the
beginning)
performer (folder name*2)
= Track title (file name*2)
= (back to the beginning)
Selecting a track/folder
A : The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
B : Clock with the current track number
Selecting preset station
• For MP3/WMA disc, select the desired folder, then the
desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG
DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and
file name appear.
2
or
External component operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary)
input jack on the control panel.
• Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT”
= “AUX IN” setting, see “Menu operations.”
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
3.5 mm (3/16”) stereo
mini plug (not supplied)
Portable audio player, etc.
2 – EN
Menu items Selectable settings
BEEP • BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone.
• BEEP OFF: Deactivates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5 • HIGH POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
• LOW POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less
Initial: Underlined
SETTINGS
Sound adjustments
Preset values
or
than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
• AM OFF: Disable “AM” in source selection.
• AM ON: Enable “AM” in source selection.
• AUX OFF: Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
Indication (For)
AM*6
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
OFF
AUX IN*7
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
• AUX ON: Enable “AUX IN” in source selection.
5
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level is set
higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Select “EQ”
6
7
*
*
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
+02 00
ON
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
+02 +03 OFF
TROUBLESHOOTING
* You can change “USER” settings and store as your own sound mode (see below).
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
Storing your own sound mode
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Select “USER” for “EQ”.
1 Select a tone.
BASS Ô TREBLE
2 Adjust the Level.
–06 to +06
3 Repeat 1 and 2 for the
other tone if necessary.
• This unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see “Menu
operations”).
While “USER”
is shown on
the display...
This mode will be canceled if
no operation is done for about
30 seconds.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see “Menu
operations”).
Insert the disc correctly.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for
recording.
• Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Move to the next (or previous) character
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Disc can be neither played back nor
ejected.
position.
Show the title entry screen.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
the title.
• Check the cords and connections.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
Select a character.
Finish the procedure.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
• Noise is generated.
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
Menu operations
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
Initial: Underlined
Menu items Selectable settings
DEMO
• DEMO ON: The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
about 20 seconds.
• DEMO OFF: Cancels.
CLOCK
• CLOCK ON: The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the power is
turned off.
SPECIFICATIONS
Audio amplifier section
Power Output:
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω and
≤ 1% THD+N
Signal to Noise Ratio:
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)
DISP*1
CD player section
CLOCK SET
EQ
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute. [Initial: 1:00]
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
Type:
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
DIMMER
• DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination.
• DIMMER OFF: Cancels.
• SCROLL ONCE: Scrolls the displayed information once.
• SCROLL AUTO: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• SCROLL OFF: Cancels.
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
• TAG ON: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
• TAG OFF: Cancels.
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
SCROLL*2
98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Bass: 12 dB at 100 Hz
Treble: 12 dB at 10 kHz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Less than measurable limit
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
MP3 Decoding Format:
TAG
DISPLAY
Frequency Response:
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Line-Out Level/Impedance: 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
AREA
• AREA US: When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.
• AREA EU: When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during
auto search).
• AREA SA: When using in South American countries where FM interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is set
to 10 kHz.
• MONO ON: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost.
• MONO OFF: Restore the stereo effect.
• AUTO: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between adjacent stations.
(Stereo effect may be lost.)
• WIDE: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be
degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
R06 – F06: Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]
General
Tuner section
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Frequency Range:
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Grounding System:
MONO*3
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz) Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
IF BAND
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)
Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)
Mass (approx.):
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)
FADER*4
BALANCE
LOUD
[FM Tuner]
L06 – R06: Adjust the left and right speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]
• LOUD OFF: Cancels.
• LOUD ON: Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 35 dB
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
AUX ADJUST AUX ADJ 00 – AUX ADJ 05: Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source to external component connected to the AUX input jack on
the control panel.
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
Having TROUBLE with operation?
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “CLOCK
OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
Please reset your unit
Still having trouble??
2
3
4
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.
*
*
*
Call 1-800-252-5722 (USA ONLY)
http://www.jvc.com
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
3 – EN
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,
consult your JVC car audio dealer.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see
“Menu operations”).
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and
thicker cords?
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
* Have you reset your unit?
Parts list for installation and connection
Å Control panel ..........................................................................................1
ı Sleeve .....................................................................................................1
Ç Trim plate ...............................................................................................1
Î Power cord..............................................................................................1
‰ Washer (ø5) ............................................................................................1
Ï Lock nut (M5)..........................................................................................1
Ì Mounting bolt—M4 x 5 mm (M4 x 1/4"); M5 x 12.5 mm (M5 x 1/2")....1
Ó Rubber cushion .......................................................................................1
È Handles...................................................................................................2
Ô Remote controller ...................................................................................1
Battery ....................................................................................................1
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
In dash-mounting
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Rear line out
Rear ground terminal
15 A fuse
When you stand the unit, be careful not
to damage the fuse on the rear.
Antenna
terminal
Do the required electrical
connections.
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body
or chassis of the car
Use the front speaker lead if your speaker
system is two-speaker system.
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting
to the car battery
Yellow *2
White with black stripe
(bypassing the ignition
switch) (constant 12 V)
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly
in place.
Front speaker
(left)
White
Fuse block
Gray with black stripe
Red
To an accessory terminal
in the fuse block
Removing the unit
Front speaker
(right)
Gray
Blue with white
stripe
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Green with black stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment or
automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)
Green
Rear speaker
(left)
Purple with black stripe
Rear speaker
(right)
Purple
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer
Remote lead
Y-connector *1
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
When using the optional stay
To the remote lead of
other equipment or
automatic antenna
if any
Stay (option)
Fire wall
JVC Amplifier
Rear
speakers
Dashboard
Signal cord *1
Install the unit at an angle of less
than 30˚.
Front speakers
Screw (option)
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot
be turned on.
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
3
*
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*
Bracket*
Flat type screws
—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*
Pocket
Bracket*
4 – EN
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-RC301
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
0709DTSMDTJEIN
GET0646-001A
[A]
EN
© 2009 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
CANCELING THE DISPLAY DEMONSTRATIONS
PREPARATIONS
How to reset your unit
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Attaching the control panel
Detaching the control panel
Turn on the power.
Select “DEMO OFF.”
(Initial setting)
Finish the procedure.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
SETTING THE CLOCK
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Turn on the power.
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
(Initial setting)
Select “CLOCK.”
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Select “CLOCK SET.”
Adjust the hour.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Adjust the minute.
Finish the procedure.
[European Union only]
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with a
cotton swab or cloth moistened
with alcohol.
To keep discs clean
Do not use the following discs:
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
Connectors
Moisture condensation
To play new discs
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
Unusual shape
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files: encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format; an
inappropriate format; layer 1/2.
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
General
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
Basic operations
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio
CD (CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after
pressing MENU button, the operation will be canceled.
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest
preset number will be automatically tuned in.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up
to 128 characters
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore,
the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product
may not be recommended.
Title assignment
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station
frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted
titles before assignment.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
1
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Control panel
Remote controller—RM-RK50
7 Installing battery
• Control the volume or selection [Turn].
• Confirm the selection [Press].
• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].
• CD: Enter playback mode [Hold].
Select the source.
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• Turn on the power.
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
• Store out of reach of children.
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.
• Do not dispose of in fire.
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.
Detach the panel.
Caution:
Check the current clock time/other information. Return to the
See also “CLOCK DISP“ of “Menu operations.” previous menu.
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose to strong light.
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.
1
*
*
You cannot select these sources if they were disabled in the Menu (See “Menu operations”).
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no disc is in the unit.
If the effectiveness of the remote controller decreases, replace the battery.
2
7 Features
Display window
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Selects the sound mode
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
Playback mode / item indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Disc indicator
• Source display
• Track number
• Folder number
• Time countdown indicator
Sound mode indicator
• Selects the source.
• Changes the preset stations.
• Changes the folders of MP3/WMA discs.
LOUD (loudness) indicator
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
Tr (track) indicator
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM
stereo broadcast with sufficient
signal strength.
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed
briefly.
• Adjusts the volume level.
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
Disc information indicators
Main display (time,
playback information)
Disc operations
Radio operations
• 4 / ¢
Eject disc.
Select “FM” or “AM.”
[Press] Go to the previous or next track.
[Hold] Reverse or fast-forward the track.
• 5 / ∞ : Go to the previous or next folder (for MP3/WMA discs).
• “NO DISC” appears.
Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
Turn on the power.
Insert disc.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Select “TUNER” = “MONO” =
“MONO ON”
(See also “Menu operations.”)
Selecting the playback modes
TRACK RPT
FOLDER RPT
:
:
Repeats current track
MP3/WMA: Repeats current
folder
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost. (MO indicator lights up.)
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator goes off.
FOLDER RND
:
MP3/WMA: Randomly plays
all tracks of current folder,
then tracks of next folders
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.
REPEAT
∆
RANDOM
ALL RND
:
Randomly plays all tracks
• To cancel repeat play or random play, select “RPT OFF”
or “RND OFF.”
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
Refer to table
on right
To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.
Prohibiting disc ejection
Changing the display information
Manual presetting (FM/AM)
You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations for AM.
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset number “04”.
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or
CD or CD Text a WMA disc
Select preset number “04.”
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
A = B = Disc title/ A = B = Album name/
performer*1 = Track
title*1 = (back to the
beginning)
performer (folder name*2)
= Track title (file name*2)
= (back to the beginning)
Selecting a track/folder
A : The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
B : Clock with the current track number
Selecting preset station
• For MP3/WMA disc, select the desired folder, then the
desired track by performing the control dial.
• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG
DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and
file name appear.
2
or
External component operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary)
input jack on the control panel.
• Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT”
= “AUX IN” setting, see “Menu operations.”
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
3.5 mm stereo mini
plug (not supplied)
Portable audio player, etc.
2
Menu items Selectable settings
BEEP • BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone.
• BEEP OFF: Deactivates the keypress tone.
AMP GAIN*5 • HIGH POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50
• LOW POWER: VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less
Initial: Underlined
SETTINGS
Sound adjustments
Preset values
Indication (For)
than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
or
AM*6
• AM OFF: Disable “AM” in source selection.
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
OFF
• AM ON: Enable “AM” in source selection.
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
AUX IN*7
• AUX OFF: Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.
• AUX ON: Enable “AUX IN” in source selection.
5
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level is set
higher than “VOLUME 30.”
Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.
Select “EQ”
6
7
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
+02 00
ON
*
*
Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.
+02 +03 OFF
TROUBLESHOOTING
* You can change “USER” settings and store as your own sound mode (see below).
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
Storing your own sound mode
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Select “USER” for “EQ.”
1 Select a tone.
BASS Ô TREBLE
2 Adjust the level.
–06 to +06
3 Repeat 1 and 2 for the
other tone if necessary.
• This unit does not work at all.
• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.
Reset the unit.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see “Menu
operations”).
While “USER”
is shown on
the display...
This mode will be canceled if
no operation is done for about
30 seconds.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• “AM” cannot be selected.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see “Menu
operations”).
Title assignment
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert the disc correctly.
Select “FM” or “AM.”
Move to the next (or previous) character
position.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used for
recording.
Show the title entry screen.
• Disc can be neither played back nor
ejected.
• Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering
the title.
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
Select a character.
Finish the procedure.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.
on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
To erase the entire title
In step 2 above...
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
Menu operations
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
• To return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
Initial: Underlined
Menu items Selectable settings
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
DEMO
• DEMO ON: The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is done for
about 20 seconds.
• DEMO OFF: Cancels.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
CLOCK DISP*1 • CLOCK ON: The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned off.
• CLOCK OFF: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the power
is turned off.
SPECIFICATIONS
CLOCK SET
EQ
:
:
Adjust the hour, then the minute. [Initial: 1:00]
CD player section
Audio amplifier section
Maximum Power Output:
Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.
Type:
Compact disc player
USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
DIMMER
• DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination.
• DIMMER OFF: Cancels.
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
SCROLL*2
• SCROLL ONCE: Scrolls the displayed information once.
• SCROLL AUTO: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
• SCROLL OFF: Cancels.
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
98 dB
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Less than measurable limit
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.
Tone Control Range: Bass:
Treble: 12 dB at 10 kHz
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
12 dB at 100 Hz
MP3 Decoding Format:
TAG DISPLAY • TAG ON: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
• TAG OFF: Cancels.
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
MONO*3
• MONO ON: Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but stereo effect will be lost.
• MONO OFF: Restore the stereo effect.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
IF BAND
• AUTO: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between adjacent stations.
(Stereo effect may be lost.)
• WIDE: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound quality will not be
degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal: AUX (auxiliary) input jack
General
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System:
Negative ground
FADER*4
BALANCE
LOUD
R06 – F06: Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]
Tuner section
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
Panel Size (approx.):
Frequency Range:
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
L06 – R06: Adjust the left and right speaker output balance. [Initial: 00]
• LOUD OFF: Cancels.
• LOUD ON: Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume
level.
[FM Tuner]
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm
Mass (approx.):
AUX ADJUST AUX ADJ 00 – AUX ADJ 05: Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source to external component connected to the AUX input jack on
the control panel.
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
1
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “CLOCK
OFF” to save the car’s battery.
2
3
4
*
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Displayed only when the source is “FM.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
3
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation. • Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,
consult your JVC car audio dealer.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω).
If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see
“Menu operations”).
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and
thicker cords?
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
* Have you reset your unit?
Parts list for installation and connection
Å Control panel ..........................................................................................1
ı Sleeve .....................................................................................................1
Ç Trim plate ...............................................................................................1
Î Power cord..............................................................................................1
‰ Handles...................................................................................................2
Ï Remote controller ...................................................................................1
Ì Battery ....................................................................................................1
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Typical connections
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
In dash-mounting
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Rear line out
Rear ground terminal
15 A fuse
Antenna
terminal
When you stand the unit, be careful not
to damage the fuse on the rear.
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body
or chassis of the car
Do the required
electrical connections.
Use the front speaker lead if your speaker
system is two-speaker system.
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting
to the car battery
Yellow *2
White with black stripe
(bypassing the ignition
switch) (constant 12 V)
Fuse block
Front speaker
(left)
White
Red
To an accessory terminal
in the fuse block
Gray with black stripe
Blue
To the automatic antenna if any
(250 mA max.)
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly
in place.
Gray
Front speaker
(right)
Blue with white
stripe
Green with black stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment
(200 mA max.)
Rear speaker
(left)
Green
Install the unit at an angle of less
than 30˚.
IMPORTANT
Purple with black stripe
Rear speaker
(right)
Removing the unit
Purple
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
RECOMMENDED CONNECTION
Custom wiring harness*1
Connecting the external amplifier
Remote lead
Y-connector *1
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
To the remote lead of
other equipment or
automatic antenna
if any
JVC Amplifier
Rear
speakers
Signal cord *1
Front speakers
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot
be turned on.
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if
coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm*
3
*
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections
Bracket*
Flat type screws
—M5 × 8 mm*
Pocket
Bracket*
* Not supplied for this unit.
4
|
Alpine PXA H800 User Manual
Bryan Boilers DST 35 User Manual
Canon LS 270G User Manual
Citizen Calculator SLD 322RG User Manual
Continental Electric CE22161 User Manual
COOLPIX by Nikon Camcorder L1 User Manual
FujiFilm FinePix X100 User Manual
Gitzo G1327 User Manual
HP (Hewlett Packard) CW450 User Manual
JVC GR DVL715 User Manual